blob: 807ee6cd903fecca9f2d8fd88f9a7d959f0dbb54 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200294 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100302 */
303enum ieee80211_bss_change {
304 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300316 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200328
329 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100330};
331
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300332/*
333 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
334 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
335 * filtering will be disabled.
336 */
337#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
338
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100339/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200340 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
341 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200342 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300343 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300344 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
345 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
346 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700347 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200348enum ieee80211_event_type {
349 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200350 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300351 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300352 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353};
354
355/**
356 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
357 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
359 */
360enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700361 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
362 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
363};
364
365/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200366 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200367 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
368 */
369struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
370 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
371};
372
373/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200374 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
375 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200376 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200377 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
378 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200379 */
380enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
381 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200382 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200383 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
384 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200385};
386
387/**
388 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
389 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
390 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
391 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
394 MLME_SUCCESS,
395 MLME_DENIED,
396 MLME_TIMEOUT,
397};
398
399/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200400 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
402 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
403 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
404 */
405struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
406 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
408 u16 reason;
409};
410
411/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300412 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
413 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
414 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300415 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300416 */
417struct ieee80211_ba_event {
418 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
419 u16 tid;
420 u16 ssn;
421};
422
423/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200425 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200426 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200427 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200430 */
431struct ieee80211_event {
432 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
433 union {
434 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300436 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 } u;
438};
439
440/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200441 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
442 *
443 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
444 *
445 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
446 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
447 */
448struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
449 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
450 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
451};
452
453/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100454 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
455 *
456 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
457 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
458 *
459 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200460 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
461 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530462 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100463 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
464 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200465 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
466 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100467 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200468 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300469 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200470 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100471 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
472 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
473 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
474 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200475 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200476 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
477 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100479 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
480 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
482 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
483 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700484 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800485 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200486 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
487 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
488 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300489 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100490 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200491 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
492 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100493 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
494 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200495 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100496 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300497 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
498 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
499 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200500 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200501 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
502 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
503 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100504 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
505 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
506 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
507 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200508 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300509 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
510 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
511 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
512 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100513 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
514 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
515 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200516 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200517 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
518 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
519 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300520 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
521 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200522 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300523 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
524 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200525 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100526 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
527 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
528 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
529 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
530 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
531 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100532 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200533 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
534 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
535 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100536 */
537struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200538 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100539 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200540 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530541 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100542 u16 aid;
543 /* erp related data */
544 bool use_cts_prot;
545 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300546 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200547 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800548 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700549 u16 beacon_int;
550 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200551 u64 sync_tsf;
552 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100553 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100554 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300555 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200556 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200557 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200558 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
559 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100560 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
561 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100562 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200563 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300564 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100565 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200566 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200567 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300568 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300569 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
570 size_t ssid_len;
571 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200572 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100573 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100574 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200575 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100576};
577
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800578/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200579 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800580 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700581 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800582 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100583 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200584 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
585 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
586 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
587 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
588 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
589 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
590 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
591 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
592 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
593 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
594 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
597 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200598 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200599 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
600 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200601 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200602 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200603 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
604 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
605 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
606 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
607 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
608 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
609 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
610 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
612 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
613 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300614 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
615 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200616 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
617 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
618 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600619 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
620 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
621 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100622 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
623 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
624 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200625 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
626 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200627 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
628 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100629 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
630 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
631 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200632 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
633 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
634 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
635 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100636 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
637 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
638 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100639 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
640 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
641 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200642 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
643 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
644 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400645 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200646 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
647 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100648 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
649 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
650 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
651 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200652 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
653 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
654 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530655 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
656 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
657 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200658 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
659 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
660 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200661 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
662 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530663 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
664 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
665 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200666 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
667 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
668 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530669 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
670 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
671 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
672 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
673 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200674 *
675 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
676 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800677 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200678enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
682 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
683 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
684 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
685 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
687 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
688 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
689 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
690 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600692 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200695 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100698 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100699 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200700 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400701 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200704 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530705 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200706 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530709 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200710};
711
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200712#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
713
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200714/**
715 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
716 *
717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
718 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530719 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
720 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100722 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200724 *
725 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
726 */
727enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
728 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530729 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100730 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100731 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200732 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200733};
734
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200735/*
736 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
737 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
738 */
739#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
742 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
743 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100744 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200745 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200746 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200747
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530748/**
749 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
750 * Rate Control algorithm.
751 *
752 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
753 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
754 *
755 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
757 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
758 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100760 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
761 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530762 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
763 * Greenfield mode.
764 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100765 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
767 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530768 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
769 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
770 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
772 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200773enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
777
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100778 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200779 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
780 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
781 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
782 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
783 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100784 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
785 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
786 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800787};
788
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200789
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200790/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
791#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200792
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200793/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
794#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
795
796/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200797#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200798
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200799/* maximum number of rate table entries */
800#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
801
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200802/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200803 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200804 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200805 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
806 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200807 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200808 *
809 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
810 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
811 *
812 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
813 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200814 *
815 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
816 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
817 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
818 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300819 * information::
820 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200821 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300822 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200823 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
824 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
825 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
826 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300827 * information should then contain::
828 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200829 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300830 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200831 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
832 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200833 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200834struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
835 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100836 u16 count:5,
837 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000838} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200839
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100840#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
841
842static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
843 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
844{
845 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200846 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
847 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100848}
849
850static inline u8
851ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
852{
853 return rate->idx & 0xF;
854}
855
856static inline u8
857ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
858{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200859 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100860}
861
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200862/**
863 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200864 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200865 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
866 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
867 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
868 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
869 *
870 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200871 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200872 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100873 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700874 * @control: union for control data
875 * @status: union for status data
876 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100877 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700878 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100879 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700880 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200881 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200882 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200883struct ieee80211_tx_info {
884 /* common information */
885 u32 flags;
886 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200887
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200888 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100889
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100890 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100891
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200892 union {
893 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200894 union {
895 /* rate control */
896 struct {
897 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
898 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
899 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200900 u8 use_rts:1;
901 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200902 u8 short_preamble:1;
903 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200904 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200905 };
906 /* only needed before rate control */
907 unsigned long jiffies;
908 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200909 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +0200910 union {
911 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
913
914 /* When packets are enqueued on txq it's easy
915 * to re-construct the vif pointer. There's no
916 * more space in tx_info so it can be used to
917 * store the necessary enqueue time for packet
918 * sojourn time computation.
919 */
920 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
921 };
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200922 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200923 u32 flags;
924 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200925 } control;
926 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200927 u64 cookie;
928 } ack;
929 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200930 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200931 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200932 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100933 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200934 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300935 u16 tx_time;
936 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200937 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200938 struct {
939 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
940 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200941 u8 pad[4];
942
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200943 void *rate_driver_data[
944 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
945 };
946 void *driver_data[
947 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200948 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700949};
950
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300951/**
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +0200952 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
953 *
954 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
955 * @info: Basic tx status information
956 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
957 */
958struct ieee80211_tx_status {
959 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
960 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
961 struct sk_buff *skb;
962};
963
964/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200965 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
966 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200967 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
968 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
969 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200970 *
971 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
972 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
973 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
974 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
975 */
976struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200977 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
978 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200979 const u8 *common_ies;
980 size_t common_ie_len;
981};
982
983
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200984static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
985{
986 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
987}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400988
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200989static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
990{
991 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
992}
993
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200994/**
995 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
996 *
997 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
998 *
999 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1000 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1001 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1002 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1003 *
1004 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1005 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1006 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1007 */
1008static inline void
1009ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1010{
1011 int i;
1012
1013 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1014 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1015 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1016 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1017 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1018 /* clear the rate counts */
1019 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1020 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1021
1022 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001023 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001024 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1025 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1026 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1027}
1028
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001029
1030/**
1031 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1032 *
1033 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1034 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1035 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1036 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001037 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1038 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001039 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001040 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1041 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001042 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1043 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1044 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1045 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001046 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1047 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001048 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1049 * the frame.
1050 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1051 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001052 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001053 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1054 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1055 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001056 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1057 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1058 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001059 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1060 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001061 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1062 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001063 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1064 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1065 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001066 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1067 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1068 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1069 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1070 * on this subframe
1071 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1072 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001073 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1074 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001075 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1076 * processing it in any regular way.
1077 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1078 * them for sniffing purposes.
1079 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1080 * monitor interfaces.
1081 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1082 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001083 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1084 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1085 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1086 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1087 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1088 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1089 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1090 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1091 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001092 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1093 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1094 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001095 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1096 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1097 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001098 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1099 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001100 */
1101enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001102 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1103 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001104 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001105 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1106 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1107 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1108 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001109 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001110 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1111 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1112 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1113 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1114 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1115 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1116 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1117 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1118 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1119 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1120 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1121 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1122 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1123 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1124 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1125 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001126};
1127
1128/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001129 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001130 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001131 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001132 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1133 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1134 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1135 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1136 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1137 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1138 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1139 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001140 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001141 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001142enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1143 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001144 RX_ENC_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(1),
1145 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1146 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1147 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1148 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1149 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001150};
1151
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001152#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1153
1154enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1155 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1156 RX_ENC_HT,
1157 RX_ENC_VHT,
1158};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001159
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001160/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001161 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1162 *
1163 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1164 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001165 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001166 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001167 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1168 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001169 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1170 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001171 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1172 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001173 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001174 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001175 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1176 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001177 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1178 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1179 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001180 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1181 * values were filled.
1182 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1183 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001184 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001185 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001186 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001187 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001188 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001189 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1190 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001191 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001192 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001193 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1194 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1195 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001196 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001197struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1198 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001199 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001200 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001201 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001202 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001203 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001204 u8 enc_flags;
1205 u8 encoding:2, bw:3;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001206 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001207 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001208 u8 rx_flags;
1209 u8 band;
1210 u8 antenna;
1211 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001212 u8 chains;
1213 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001214 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001215};
1216
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001217/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001218 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1219 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1220 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1221 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1222 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1223 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1224 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1225 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1226 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1227 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1228 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1229 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1230 * @data field.
1231 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1232 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1233 * length
1234 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1235 *
1236 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1237 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1238 * data.
1239 */
1240struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1241 u32 present;
1242 u8 align;
1243 u8 oui[3];
1244 u8 subns;
1245 u8 pad;
1246 u16 len;
1247 u8 data[];
1248} __packed;
1249
1250/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001251 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1252 *
1253 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1254 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001255 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1256 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1257 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001258 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1259 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1260 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1261 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1262 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1263 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1264 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001265 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1266 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1267 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1268 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1269 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001270 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1271 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001272 */
1273enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001274 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001275 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001276 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001277 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001278};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001279
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001280
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001281/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001282 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1283 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001284 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001285 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001286 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001287 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001288 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001289 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001290 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001291 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001292 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1293 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001294 */
1295enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001296 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001297 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001298 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001299 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001300 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1301 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1302 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001303 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001304};
1305
1306/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001307 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1308 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001309 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1310 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1311 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1312 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1313 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001314 */
1315enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1316 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1317 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1318 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1319 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1320
1321 /* keep last */
1322 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1323};
1324
1325/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001326 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1327 *
1328 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1329 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001330 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1331 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001332 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001333 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1334 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1335 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001336 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1337 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1338 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1339 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001340 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1341 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001342 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001343 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001344 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001345 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001346 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001347 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1348 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001349 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001350 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1351 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001352 *
1353 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1354 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001355 * configured for an HT channel.
1356 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1357 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001358 */
1359struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001360 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001361 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001362
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001363 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001364 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001365
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001366 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1367
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001368 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001369 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001370 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001371};
1372
1373/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001374 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1375 *
1376 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1377 * operation.
1378 *
1379 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1380 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1381 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1382 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001383 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1384 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001385 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1386 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001387 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001388 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1389 */
1390struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1391 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001392 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001393 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001394 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001395 u8 count;
1396};
1397
1398/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001399 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1400 *
1401 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1402 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001403 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1404 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1405 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1406 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001407 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1408 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1409 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1410 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001411 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1412 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1413 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001414 */
1415enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1416 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001417 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001418 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001419 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001420};
1421
1422/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001423 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1424 *
1425 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1426 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1427 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001428 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001429 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1430 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001431 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001432 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1433 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001434 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1435 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1436 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001437 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001438 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1439 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1440 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1441 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001442 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1443 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001444 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1445 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1446 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1447 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1448 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001449 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001450 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001451 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001452 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1453 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001454 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001455 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001456 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001457 */
1458struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001459 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001460 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001461 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001462 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001463 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001464 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001465
1466 u8 cab_queue;
1467 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1468
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001469 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1470
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001471 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1472
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001473 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001474
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001475#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1476 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1477#endif
1478
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001479 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1480
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001481 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001482 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001483};
1484
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001485static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1486{
1487#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001488 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001489#endif
1490 return false;
1491}
1492
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001493/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001494 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1495 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1496 *
1497 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1498 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1499 *
1500 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1501 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1502 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1503 */
1504struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1505
1506/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001507 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1508 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1509 *
1510 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1511 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1512 *
1513 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1514 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1515 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1516 */
1517struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1518
1519/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001520 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1521 *
1522 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1523 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1524 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001525 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1526 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001527 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1528 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001529 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1530 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1531 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001532 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1533 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001534 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001535 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1536 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001537 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001538 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001539 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001540 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1541 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1542 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001543 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1544 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1545 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1546 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1547 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1548 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1549 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001550 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001551 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001552 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001553 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1554 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1555 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001556 */
1557enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001558 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1559 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1560 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1561 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1562 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1563 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1564 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001565 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001566};
1567
1568/**
1569 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1570 *
1571 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1572 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1573 *
1574 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1575 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001576 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001577 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001578 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1579 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001580 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1581 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1582 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001583 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1584 * data block:
1585 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1586 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1587 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001588 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1589 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001590 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001591struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001592 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001593 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001594 u8 icv_len;
1595 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001596 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001597 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001598 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001599 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001600 u8 key[0];
1601};
1602
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001603#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1604
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001605#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1606#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1607
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001608/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001609 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1610 *
1611 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1612 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1613 * reverse order than in packet)
1614 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1615 * reverse order than in packet)
1616 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1617 * reverse order than in packet)
1618 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1619 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001620 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001621 */
1622struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1623 union {
1624 struct {
1625 u32 iv32;
1626 u16 iv16;
1627 } tkip;
1628 struct {
1629 u8 pn[6];
1630 } ccmp;
1631 struct {
1632 u8 pn[6];
1633 } aes_cmac;
1634 struct {
1635 u8 pn[6];
1636 } aes_gmac;
1637 struct {
1638 u8 pn[6];
1639 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001640 struct {
1641 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1642 u8 seq_len;
1643 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001644 };
1645};
1646
1647/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001648 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1649 *
1650 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1651 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1652 *
1653 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1654 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1655 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1656 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1657 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1658 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1659 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1660 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1661 * key_idx value calculation:
1662 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1663 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1664 */
1665struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1666 u32 cipher;
1667 u16 iftype;
1668 u8 hdr_len;
1669 u8 pn_len;
1670 u8 pn_off;
1671 u8 key_idx_off;
1672 u8 key_idx_mask;
1673 u8 key_idx_shift;
1674 u8 mic_len;
1675};
1676
1677/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001678 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1679 *
1680 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1681 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1682 *
1683 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1684 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1685 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001686enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001687 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001688};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001689
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001690/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001691 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1692 *
1693 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1694 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1695 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1696 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1697 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1698 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1699 */
1700enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1701 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1702 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1703 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1704 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1705 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1706 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1707};
1708
1709/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001710 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1711 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1712 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1713 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1714 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1715 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1716 *
1717 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1718 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1719 */
1720enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1721 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1722 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1723 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1724 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1725};
1726
1727/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001728 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1729 *
1730 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001731 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001732 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1733 */
1734struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1735 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1736 struct {
1737 s8 idx;
1738 u8 count;
1739 u8 count_cts;
1740 u8 count_rts;
1741 u16 flags;
1742 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1743};
1744
1745/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001746 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1747 *
1748 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1749 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1750 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1751 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1752 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001753 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001754 *
1755 * @addr: MAC address
1756 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001757 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001758 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1759 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001760 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1761 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1762 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001763 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1764 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001765 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001766 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001767 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001768 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1769 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001770 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001771 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001772 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1773 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1774 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1775 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001776 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001777 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001778 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001779 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1780 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301781 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001782 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1783 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1784 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001785 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001786 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001787 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001788 */
1789struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001790 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001791 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1792 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001793 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001794 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001795 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001796 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001797 u8 uapsd_queues;
1798 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001799 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001800 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001801 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001802 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001803 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001804 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301805 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001806 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001807
1808 /**
1809 * @max_amsdu_len:
1810 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1811 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1812 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1813 *
1814 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1815 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1816 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1817 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1818 *
1819 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1820 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1821 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1822 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001823 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001824 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001825 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001826
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001827 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1828
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001829 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001830 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001831};
1832
1833/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001834 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1835 *
1836 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301837 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001838 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001839 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1840 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1841 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001842enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001843 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1844};
1845
1846/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001847 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1848 *
1849 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1850 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1851 */
1852struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1853 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1854};
1855
1856/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001857 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1858 *
1859 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1860 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1861 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1862 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001863 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001864 *
1865 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1866 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1867 */
1868struct ieee80211_txq {
1869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1870 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1871 u8 tid;
1872 u8 ac;
1873
1874 /* must be last */
1875 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1876};
1877
1878/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001879 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1880 *
1881 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1882 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1883 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1884 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1885 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1886 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001887 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1888 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1889 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1890 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1891 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1892 * algorithm.
1893 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1894 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1895 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1896 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1897 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1898 * CCK frames.
1899 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001900 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1901 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1902 * the FCS at the end.
1903 *
1904 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1905 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1906 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1907 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1908 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1909 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001910 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001911 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001912 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1913 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1914 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1915 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1916 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001917 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1918 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1919 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1920 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1921 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001922 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1923 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1924 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301925 *
1926 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1927 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001928 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001929 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1930 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1931 *
1932 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1933 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1934 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1935 *
1936 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1937 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001938 *
1939 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1940 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001941 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301942 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1943 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1944 * the stack.
1945 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001946 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001947 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1948 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001949 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001950 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1951 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1952 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001953 *
1954 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1955 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1956 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1957 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1958 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1959 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001960 *
1961 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1962 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1963 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1964 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1965 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1966 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001967 *
1968 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1969 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1970 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001971 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001972 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1973 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1974 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001975 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001976 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1977 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1978 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1979 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001980 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1981 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1982 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1983 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1984 * supported cipher suites.
1985 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001986 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1987 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1988 * for frames.
1989 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001990 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1991 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1992 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1993 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001994 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001995 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1996 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1997 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001998 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1999 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2000 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01002001 *
2002 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2003 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002004 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02002005 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2006 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2007 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2008 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002009 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2010 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2011 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2012 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002013 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002014 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2015 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2016 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002017 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002018 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002019 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002020 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2021 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2022 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002023 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2024 * within A-MPDU.
2025 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002026 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2027 * for sent beacons.
2028 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002029 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2030 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2031 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2032 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2033 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002034 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2035 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2036 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2037 * timeout.
2038 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002039 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2040 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2041 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002042 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2043 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2044 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2045 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2046 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2047 *
2048 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2049 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2050 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302051 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2052 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2053 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2054 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2055 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002056 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2057 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2058 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2059 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002060 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002061 */
2062enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002063 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2064 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2065 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2066 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2067 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2068 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2069 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2070 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2071 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2072 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2073 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2074 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2075 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2076 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2077 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2078 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2079 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2080 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2081 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2082 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2083 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2084 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2085 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2086 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2087 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2088 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2089 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2090 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2091 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002092 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002093 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002094 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002095 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002096 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002097 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002098 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2099 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302100 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002101 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002102
2103 /* keep last, obviously */
2104 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002105};
2106
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002107/**
2108 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002109 *
2110 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2111 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2112 *
2113 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2114 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2115 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002116 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2117 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002118 *
2119 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2120 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002121 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2122 * along with this structure.
2123 *
2124 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2125 *
2126 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2127 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2128 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002129 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2130 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002131 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002132 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002133 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002134 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002135 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002136 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002137 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002138 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002139 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2140 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2141 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002142 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2143 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2144 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002145 *
2146 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2147 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002148 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2149 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002150 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2151 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002152 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2153 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002154 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002155 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2156 * can handle.
2157 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2158 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002159 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002160 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002161 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2162 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2163 * aggregation.
2164 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2165 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2166 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002167 *
2168 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002169 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2170 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2171 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2172 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002173 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002174 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2175 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2176 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002177 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2178 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002179 *
2180 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2181 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002182 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002183 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002184 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002185 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2186 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002187 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002188 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002189 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2190 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2191 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2192 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2193 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2194 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2195 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2196 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002197 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002198 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2199 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002200 *
2201 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2202 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2203 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2204 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2205 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2206 * neither enabled.
2207 *
2208 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2209 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2210 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002211 *
2212 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2213 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2214 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002215 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2216 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002217 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002218struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002219 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002220 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002221 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002222 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002223 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002224 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002225 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002226 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002227 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002228 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002229 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002230 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002231 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002232 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002233 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002234 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002235 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002236 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002237 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002238 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002239 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002240 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002241 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002242 struct {
2243 int units_pos;
2244 s16 accuracy;
2245 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002246 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002247 u8 uapsd_queues;
2248 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002249 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2250 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002251 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002252};
2253
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002254static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2255 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2256{
2257 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2258}
2259#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2260
2261static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2262 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2263{
2264 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2265}
2266#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2267
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002268/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002269 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2270 *
2271 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2272 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2273 */
2274struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2275 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2276
2277 /* Keep last */
2278 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2279};
2280
2281/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002282 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2283 *
2284 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2285 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2286 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2287 * @status: channel-switch response status
2288 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2289 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2290 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2291 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2292 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2293 */
2294struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2295 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2296 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2297 u8 action_code;
2298 u32 status;
2299 u32 timestamp;
2300 u16 switch_time;
2301 u16 switch_timeout;
2302 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2303 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2304};
2305
2306/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002307 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2308 *
2309 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2310 *
2311 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2312 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2313 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2314 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2315 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002316 *
2317 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002318 */
2319struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2320
2321/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002322 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2323 *
2324 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2325 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2326 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002327static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2328{
2329 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2330}
2331
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002332/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002333 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002334 *
2335 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2336 * @addr: the address to set
2337 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002338static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002339{
2340 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2341}
2342
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002343static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2344ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002345 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002346{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002347 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002348 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002349 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002350}
2351
2352static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2353ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002354 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002355{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002356 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002357 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002358 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002359}
2360
2361static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2362ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002363 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002364{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002365 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002366 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002367 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002368}
2369
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002370/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002371 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2372 * @hw: the hardware
2373 * @skb: the skb
2374 *
2375 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2376 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2377 */
2378void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2379
2380/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002381 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002382 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002383 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2384 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2385 *
2386 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2387 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002388 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2389 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2390 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002391 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2392 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2393 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002394 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2395 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2396 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2397 *
2398 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2399 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2400 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2401 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2402 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002403 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2404 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2405 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2406 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2407 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002408 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2409 *
2410 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2411 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2412 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2413 * based on the receive flags.
2414 *
2415 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2416 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2417 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2418 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002419 *
2420 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2421 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2422 * handler.
2423 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002424 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002425 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2426 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002427 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002428 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002429 *
2430 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2431 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2432 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002433 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002434
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002435/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002436 * DOC: Powersave support
2437 *
2438 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2439 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002440 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2441 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2442 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2443 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2444 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2445 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2446 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2447 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002448 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002449 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2450 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2451 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002452 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2453 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002454 *
2455 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2456 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2457 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002458 *
2459 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2460 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2461 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2462 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002463 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2464 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002465 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002466 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002467 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2468 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2469 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2470 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2471 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2472 * periods.
2473 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002474 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002475 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2476 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2477 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2478 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2479 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2480 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2481 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2482 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2483 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2484 *
2485 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002486 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002487 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002488 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2489 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2490 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2491 *
2492 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2493 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002494 */
2495
2496/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002497 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2498 *
2499 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002500 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002501 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2502 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2503 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2504 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2505 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2506 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002507 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2508 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002509 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2510 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2511 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2512 *
2513 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2514 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2515 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2516 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2517 *
2518 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2519 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2520 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2521 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002522 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002523 * - a list of information element IDs
2524 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2525 *
2526 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2527 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2528 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2529 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2530 * vendor information elements.
2531 *
2532 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2533 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2534 *
2535 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2536 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2537 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2538 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2539 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2540 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2541 *
2542 *
2543 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2544 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2545 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2546 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2547 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2548 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2549 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2550 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2551 *
2552 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2553 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2554 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002555 */
2556
2557/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002558 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2559 *
2560 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2561 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2562 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2563 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2564 *
2565 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2566 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2567 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2568 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2569 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2570 * hardware flags.
2571 *
2572 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2573 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2574 * turned off otherwise.
2575 *
2576 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2577 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2578 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2579 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2580 */
2581
2582/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002583 * DOC: Frame filtering
2584 *
2585 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2586 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2587 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2588 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2589 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2590 *
2591 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2592 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2593 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2594 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002595 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2596 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2597 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2598 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2599 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2600 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2601 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002602 *
2603 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2604 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2605 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2606 * or dropped.
2607 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002608 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2609 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2610 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2611 * the flag, but not clear it.
2612 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2613 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2614 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2615 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2616 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2617 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2618 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2619 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002620 */
2621
2622/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002623 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2624 *
2625 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2626 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2627 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2628 *
2629 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2630 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2631 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2632 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2633 * the driver code.
2634 *
2635 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2636 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2637 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2638 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2639 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2640 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2641 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2642 *
2643 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2644 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2645 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2646 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2647 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2648 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2649 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2650 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2651 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2652 * @sta_notify callback.
2653 *
2654 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2655 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2656 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2657 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2658 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2659 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2660 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002661 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002662 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2663 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2664 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2665 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2666 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2667 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2668 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002669 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2670 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2671 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002672 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2673 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2674 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2675 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2676 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2677 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2678 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2679 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2680 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2681 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2682 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2683 *
2684 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2685 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2686 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2687 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2688 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2689 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2690 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2691 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2692 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2693 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002694 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002695 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2696 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2697 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2698 *
2699 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2700 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2701 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2702 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2703 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002704 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002705 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2706 *
2707 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2708 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2709 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2710 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002711 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002712 *
2713 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2714 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2715 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2716 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002717 */
2718
2719/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002720 * DOC: HW queue control
2721 *
2722 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2723 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2724 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2725 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2726 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2727 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2728 *
2729 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2730 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2731 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2732 *
2733 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2734 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2735 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2736 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2737 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2738 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2739 * the hardware queue.
2740 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2741 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2742 *
2743 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2744 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2745 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2746 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2747 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2748 *
2749 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2750 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2751 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2752 * off-channel queue: 9
2753 *
2754 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2755 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2756 *
2757 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2758 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2759 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2760 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2761 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2762 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2763 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2764 *
2765 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2766 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2767 *
2768 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2769 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2770 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2771 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2772 */
2773
2774/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002775 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2776 *
2777 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2778 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2779 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2780 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2781 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002782 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2783 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2784 * multicast address.
2785 *
2786 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2787 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2788 *
2789 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2790 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2791 *
2792 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2793 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2794 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2795 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2796 * honour this flag if possible.
2797 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002798 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2799 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002800 *
2801 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002802 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002803 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002804 *
2805 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002806 */
2807enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002808 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2809 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2810 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2811 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2812 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2813 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002814 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002815 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002816};
2817
2818/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002819 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2820 *
2821 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2822 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002823 *
2824 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2825 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002826 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002827 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2828 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002829 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2830 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2831 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002832 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002833 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2834 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2835 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2836 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2837 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2838 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2839 * session is gone and removes the station.
2840 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2841 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2842 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2843 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002844 */
2845enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2846 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2847 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002848 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002849 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2850 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2851 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002852 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002853};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002854
2855/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002856 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2857 *
2858 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2859 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2860 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2861 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2862 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2863 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2864 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2865 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2866 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2867 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2868 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2869 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2870 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2871 */
2872struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2873 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2874 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2875 u16 tid;
2876 u16 ssn;
2877 u8 buf_size;
2878 bool amsdu;
2879 u16 timeout;
2880};
2881
2882/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002883 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2884 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002885 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2886 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002887 */
2888enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2889 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002890 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002891};
2892
2893/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002894 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2895 *
2896 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002897 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2898 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2899 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002900 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002901 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2902 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2903 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002904 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2905 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002906 */
2907enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2908 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2909 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002910 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002911 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002912};
2913
2914/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002915 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2916 *
2917 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2918 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2919 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2920 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2921 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2922 *
2923 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2924 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2925 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2926 */
2927enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2928 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2929 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2930};
2931
2932/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002933 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2934 *
2935 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2936 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2937 *
2938 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2939 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2940 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2941 * of wowlan configuration)
2942 */
2943enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2944 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2945 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2946};
2947
2948/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002949 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2950 *
2951 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2952 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2953 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2954 *
2955 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2956 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2957 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002958 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002959 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002960 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002961 *
2962 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2963 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2964 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2965 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2966 * or zero.
2967 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2968 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2969 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002970 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002971 *
2972 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2973 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2974 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2975 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002976 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2977 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002978 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002979 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002980 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2981 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2982 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2983 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2984 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002985 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2986 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2987 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2988 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002989 *
2990 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2991 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2992 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2993 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2994 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2995 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002996 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2997 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2998 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2999 * in suspend().
3000 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003001 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04003002 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003003 * and @stop must be implemented.
3004 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3005 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3006 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3007 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3008 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003009 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003010 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003011 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3012 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3013 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3014 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3015 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3016 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003017 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3018 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3019 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3020 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3021 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3022 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3023 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003024 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003025 *
3026 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3027 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003028 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003029 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003030 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003031 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3032 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3033 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3034 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3035 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003036 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3037 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003038 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003039 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3040 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3041 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3042 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003043 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3044 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003045 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003046 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003047 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3048 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3049 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3050 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3051 * which flags are changed.
3052 * This callback can sleep.
3053 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003054 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003055 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003056 *
3057 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003058 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3059 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003060 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003061 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003062 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003063 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003064 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3065 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3066 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003067 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003068 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003069 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3070 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3071 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3072 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3073 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3074 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003075 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3076 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3077 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3078 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003079 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003080 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003081 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3082 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003083 * that power save is disabled.
3084 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3085 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3086 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3087 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3088 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3089 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3090 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003091 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003092 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003093 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3094 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3095 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3096 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3097 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3098 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3099 * The callback can sleep.
3100 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003101 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3102 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3103 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3104 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3105 *
3106 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003107 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003108 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003109 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3110 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003111 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3112 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3113 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003114 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003115 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3116 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3117 * this notification.
3118 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003119 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003120 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3121 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003122 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003123 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003124 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3125 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3126 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003127 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003128 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003129 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003130 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3131 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3132 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003133 * The callback can sleep.
3134 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003135 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003136 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003137 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003138 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3139 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3140 *
3141 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003142 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3143 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3144 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3145 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3146 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003147 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303148 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3149 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003150 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3151 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303152 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003153 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003154 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3155 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3156 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003157 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003158 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3159 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3160 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3161 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003162 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3163 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3164 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3165 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3166 * The callback can sleep.
3167 *
3168 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3169 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3170 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3171 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3172 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003173 * The callback can sleep.
3174 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003175 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3176 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3177 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3178 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3179 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3180 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3181 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003182 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3183 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3184 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003185 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003186 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3187 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3188 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3189 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3190 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3191 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3192 * The callback can sleep.
3193 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003194 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003195 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003196 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003197 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003198 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003199 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003200 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003201 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003202 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003203 *
3204 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003205 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003206 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003207 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003208 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003209 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3210 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3211 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3212 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3213 * The callback can sleep.
3214 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003215 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3216 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3217 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3218 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003219 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003220 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003221 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3222 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3223 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003224 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003225 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003226 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003227 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3228 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003229 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3230 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3231 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003232 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003233 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003234 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3235 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003236 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3237 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3238 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003239 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003240 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3241 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003242 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003243 *
3244 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003245 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3246 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3247 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3248 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003249 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003250 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003251 *
3252 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3253 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3254 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3255 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003256 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003257 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3258 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3259 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3260 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3261 *
3262 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003263 *
3264 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3265 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3266 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3267 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3268 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3269 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003270 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003271 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3272 * must be accepted in this case.
3273 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003274 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3275 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003276 *
3277 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3278 *
3279 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303280 *
3281 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3282 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303283 *
3284 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3285 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3286 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003287 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3288 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003289 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003290 *
3291 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3292 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3293 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3294 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003295 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003296 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3297 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3298 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3299 * more-data bit must always be set.
3300 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3301 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003302 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3303 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3304 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3305 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3306 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3307 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003308 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3309 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3310 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003311 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3312 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003313 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003314 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003315 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003316 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3317 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3318 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003319 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003320 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3321 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3322 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3323 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003324 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003325 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003326 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3327 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3328 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003329 *
3330 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3331 *
3332 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3333 *
3334 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3335 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3336 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003337 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3338 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3339 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3340 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3341 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3342 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3343 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3344 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3345 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3346 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3347 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3348 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003349 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003350 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3351 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3352 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3353 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3354 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3355 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3356 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3357 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3358 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003359 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303360 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003361 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303362 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003363 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3364 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3365 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303366 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003367 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3368 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303369 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003370 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3371 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303372 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003373 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3374 * another, as specified in the list of
3375 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3376 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303377 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003378 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003379 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3380 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3381 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3382 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3383 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3384 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3385 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003386 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003387 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3388 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3389 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3390 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3391 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003392 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003393 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3394 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3395 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003396 *
3397 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3398 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3399 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003400 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003401 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3402 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003403 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003404 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003405 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3406 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003407 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3408 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003409 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003410 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003411 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3412 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3413 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003414 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003415 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3416 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3417 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3418 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003419 *
3420 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3421 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3422 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003423 *
3424 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3425 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003426 *
3427 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3428 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3429 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3430 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3431 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3432 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3433 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3434 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3435 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003436 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3437 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3438 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3439 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3440 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3441 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3442 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003443 *
3444 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003445 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3446 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3447 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3448 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003449 *
3450 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3451 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003452 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3453 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3454 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3455 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3456 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3457 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003458 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3459 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3460 * this call.
3461 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3462 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3463 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003464 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003465struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003466 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3467 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3468 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003469 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003470 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003471#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3472 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3473 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003474 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003475#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003476 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003477 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003478 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3479 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003480 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003481 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003482 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003483 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003484 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3485 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3486 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3487 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003488
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003489 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3490 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3491
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003492 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003493 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003494 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3495 unsigned int changed_flags,
3496 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003497 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003498 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3500 unsigned int filter_flags,
3501 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003502 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3503 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003504 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003506 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003507 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003508 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3509 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3510 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3511 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003512 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3513 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3514 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003515 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3516 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003517 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003518 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003519 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3520 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003521 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3522 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3523 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003524 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003525 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003526 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003527 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3529 const u8 *mac_addr);
3530 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3531 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003532 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3533 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003534 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3535 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3536 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003537 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003538 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003539 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3540 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3541 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3542 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303543#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3544 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3545 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3546 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3547 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303548#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003549 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003550 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003551 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3552 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3553 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3554 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003555 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3556 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3557 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003558 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3559 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3560 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3561 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003562 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3563 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3564 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003565 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3566 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3567 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3568 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003569 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003570 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003571 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003572 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3573 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3574 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003575 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3576 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003577 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003578 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003579
3580 /**
3581 * @ampdu_action:
3582 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3583 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3584 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3585 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3586 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3587 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3588 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3589 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3590 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3591 *
3592 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3593 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3594 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3595 *
3596 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3597 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3598 *
3599 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3600 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3601 * - ``TX: 81``
3602 *
3603 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3604 *
3605 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3606 * The callback can sleep.
3607 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003608 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003609 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003610 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003611 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3612 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003613 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003614 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003615#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003616 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3617 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003618 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3619 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3620 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003621#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003622 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3623 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003624 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003625 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003626 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003627 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3628 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003629
3630 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003631 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003632 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003633 int duration,
3634 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003635 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003636 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3637 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3638 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303639 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303640 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3641 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003642 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3643 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3644 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003645
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003646 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3647 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3648 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3649 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3650 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003651 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3652 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3653 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3654 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3655 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003656
3657 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3658 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3659 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3660 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3661 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3662 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3663 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3664 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003665
3666 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3667 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003668
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003669 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3670 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3671
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003672 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3673 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3674 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3675 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3676 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3677 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3678 u32 changed);
3679 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3680 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3681 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3682 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3683 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3684 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003685 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3686 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3687 int n_vifs,
3688 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003689
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003690 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3691 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003692
3693#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3694 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3695 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3696 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3697#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003698 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3699 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3700 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003701 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3702 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3703 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003704
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003705 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3706 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3707
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003708 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3709 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003710 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3711 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003712 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3713 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003714
3715 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3716 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3717 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3718 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003719 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003720 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3721 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3722 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003723 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3724 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3725 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003726
3727 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3728 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003729 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003730
3731 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3732 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3733 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3734 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3735 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003736 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3737 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3738 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003739 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3740 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3741 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3742 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3743 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3744 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003745};
3746
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003747/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003748 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3749 *
3750 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3751 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3752 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3753 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3754 * @priv_data_len.
3755 *
3756 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3757 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3758 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3759 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3760 *
3761 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3762 */
3763struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3764 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3765 const char *requested_name);
3766
3767/**
3768 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003769 *
3770 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3771 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3772 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3773 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3774 * @priv_data_len.
3775 *
3776 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3777 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003778 *
3779 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003780 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003781static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003782struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003783 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3784{
3785 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3786}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003787
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003788/**
3789 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3790 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003791 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3792 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3793 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003794 *
3795 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003796 *
3797 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003798 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003799int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3800
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003801/**
3802 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3803 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3804 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3805 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3806 */
3807struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3808 int throughput;
3809 int blink_time;
3810};
3811
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003812/**
3813 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3814 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3815 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3816 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3817 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3818 */
3819enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3820 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3821 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3822 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3823};
3824
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003825#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003826const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3827const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3828const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3829const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3830const char *
3831__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3832 unsigned int flags,
3833 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3834 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003835#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003836/**
3837 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3838 *
3839 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3840 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3841 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3842 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3843 *
3844 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003845 *
3846 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003847 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003848static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003849{
3850#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3851 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3852#else
3853 return NULL;
3854#endif
3855}
3856
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003857/**
3858 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3859 *
3860 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3861 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3862 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3863 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3864 *
3865 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003866 *
3867 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003868 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003869static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003870{
3871#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3872 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3873#else
3874 return NULL;
3875#endif
3876}
3877
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003878/**
3879 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3880 *
3881 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3882 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3883 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3884 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3885 *
3886 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003887 *
3888 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003889 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003890static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003891{
3892#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3893 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3894#else
3895 return NULL;
3896#endif
3897}
3898
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003899/**
3900 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3901 *
3902 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3903 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3904 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3905 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3906 *
3907 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003908 *
3909 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003910 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003911static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003912{
3913#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3914 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3915#else
3916 return NULL;
3917#endif
3918}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003919
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003920/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003921 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3922 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003923 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003924 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3925 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3926 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003927 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3928 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3929 *
3930 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003931 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003932static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003933ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003934 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3935 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3936{
3937#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003938 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003939 blink_table_len);
3940#else
3941 return NULL;
3942#endif
3943}
3944
3945/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003946 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3947 *
3948 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3949 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3950 *
3951 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3952 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003953void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3954
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003955/**
3956 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3957 *
3958 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3959 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003960 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003961 *
3962 * @hw: the hardware to free
3963 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003964void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3965
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003966/**
3967 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3968 *
3969 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3970 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3971 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3972 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3973 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3974 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3975 *
3976 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3977 */
3978void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3979
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003980/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003981 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003982 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003983 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3984 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3985 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3986 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3987 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3988 *
3989 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3990 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3991 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3992 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3993 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3994 *
3995 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3996 *
3997 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003998 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003999 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4000 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004001 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004002void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4003 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004004
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004005/**
4006 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4007 *
4008 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004009 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4010 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4011 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4012 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004013 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004014 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004015 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4016 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004017 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4018 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004019 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004020 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004021 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004022 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4023 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004024 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004025static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4026{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004027 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004028}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004029
4030/**
4031 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4032 *
4033 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004034 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4035 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004036 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004037 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4038 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004039 *
4040 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4041 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004042 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004043void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004044
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004045/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004046 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4047 *
4048 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4049 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4050 *
4051 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004052 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4053 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004054 *
4055 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4056 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4057 */
4058static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4059 struct sk_buff *skb)
4060{
4061 local_bh_disable();
4062 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4063 local_bh_enable();
4064}
4065
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004066/**
4067 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4068 *
4069 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4070 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4071 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4072 *
4073 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4074 *
4075 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4076 * each other.
4077 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004078 * @sta: currently connected sta
4079 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004080 *
4081 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004082 */
4083int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4084
4085/**
4086 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4087 * (in process context)
4088 *
4089 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4090 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4091 * applies.
4092 *
4093 * @sta: currently connected sta
4094 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004095 *
4096 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004097 */
4098static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4099 bool start)
4100{
4101 int ret;
4102
4103 local_bh_disable();
4104 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4105 local_bh_enable();
4106
4107 return ret;
4108}
4109
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004110/**
4111 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4112 * @sta: currently connected station
4113 *
4114 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4115 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4116 * connected station was received.
4117 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4118 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4119 * be serialized.
4120 */
4121void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4122
4123/**
4124 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4125 * @sta: currently connected station
4126 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4127 *
4128 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4129 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4130 * from a connected station was received.
4131 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4132 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4133 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004134 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4135 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4136 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4137 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004138 */
4139void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4140
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004141/*
4142 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4143 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4144 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004145#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004146
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004147/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004148 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004149 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004150 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4151 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004152 *
4153 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004154 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4155 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004156 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004157 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4158 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4159 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4160 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4161 *
4162 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4163 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4164 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4165 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4166 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4167 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4168 *
4169 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4170 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4171 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4172 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4173 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004174 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004175void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4176 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004177
4178/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004179 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4180 *
4181 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4182 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4183 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4184 *
4185 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4186 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4187 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4188 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4189 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4190 */
4191void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4192 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4193 struct sk_buff *skb,
4194 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4195 int max_rates);
4196
4197/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004198 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4199 *
4200 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4201 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4202 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4203 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004204 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4205 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004206 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004207 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4208 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004209 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004210 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4211 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004212 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004213void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004214 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004215
4216/**
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004217 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4218 *
4219 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4220 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4221 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4222 *
4223 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4224 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4225 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4226 *
4227 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4228 * @status: tx status information
4229 */
4230void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4231 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4232
4233/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004234 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4235 *
4236 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4237 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4238 * specific skbs.
4239 *
4240 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4241 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4242 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4243 *
4244 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4245 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4246 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4247 * @info: tx status information
4248 */
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004249static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4250 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4251 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4252{
4253 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4254 .sta = sta,
4255 .info = info,
4256 };
4257
4258 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4259}
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004260
4261/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004262 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4263 *
4264 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4265 *
4266 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4267 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4268 * for a single hardware.
4269 *
4270 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4271 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4272 */
4273static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4274 struct sk_buff *skb)
4275{
4276 local_bh_disable();
4277 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4278 local_bh_enable();
4279}
4280
4281/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004282 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004283 *
4284 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4285 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4286 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004287 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4288 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004289 *
4290 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4291 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004292 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004293void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004294 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004295
4296/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004297 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4298 *
4299 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4300 * connected STA.
4301 *
4302 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4303 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4304 */
4305void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4306
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004307#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4308
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004309/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004310 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4311 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4312 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004313 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4314 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4315 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004316 */
4317struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4318 u16 tim_offset;
4319 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004320
4321 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004322};
4323
4324/**
4325 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4326 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4327 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4328 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4329 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4330 *
4331 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4332 * obtain the beacon template.
4333 *
4334 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4335 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004336 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4337 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004338 *
4339 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4340 *
4341 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4342 */
4343struct sk_buff *
4344ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4345 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4346 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4347
4348/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004349 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4350 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004351 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004352 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4353 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4354 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4355 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4356 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4357 *
4358 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004359 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004360 *
4361 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4362 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004363 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4364 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004365 *
4366 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004367 *
4368 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004369 */
4370struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4371 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4372 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4373
4374/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004375 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4376 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004377 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004378 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004379 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004380 *
4381 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004382 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004383static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4384 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4385{
4386 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4387}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004388
4389/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004390 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4391 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4392 *
4393 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4394 * This function is called implicitly when
4395 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4396 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4397 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4398 *
4399 * Return: new csa counter value
4400 */
4401u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4402
4403/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004404 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4405 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4406 *
4407 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004408 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004409 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4410 */
4411void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4412
4413/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004414 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004415 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4416 *
4417 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4418 */
4419bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4420
4421
4422/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004423 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4424 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4425 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4426 *
4427 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4428 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4429 *
4430 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004431 *
4432 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004433 */
4434struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4435 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4436
4437/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004438 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4439 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4440 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4441 *
4442 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4443 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4444 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4445 *
4446 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4447 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004448 *
4449 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004450 */
4451struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4452 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4453
4454/**
4455 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4456 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4457 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4458 *
4459 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4460 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4461 * BSSID and address is used.
4462 *
4463 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4464 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004465 *
4466 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004467 */
4468struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4469 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4470
4471/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004472 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4473 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004474 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004475 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4476 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004477 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004478 *
4479 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4480 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004481 *
4482 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004483 */
4484struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004485 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004486 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004487 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004488
4489/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004490 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4491 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004492 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004493 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4494 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004495 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004496 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4497 *
4498 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4499 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4500 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4501 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4502 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004503void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004504 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004505 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004506 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4507
4508/**
4509 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4510 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004511 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004512 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004513 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004514 *
4515 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4516 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4517 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004518 *
4519 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004520 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004521__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4522 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004523 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004524
4525/**
4526 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4527 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004528 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004529 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4530 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004531 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004532 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4533 *
4534 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4535 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4536 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4537 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4538 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004539void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4540 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004541 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004542 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004543 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4544
4545/**
4546 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4547 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004548 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004549 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004550 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004551 *
4552 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4553 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4554 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004555 *
4556 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004557 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004558__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4559 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004560 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004561 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004562
4563/**
4564 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4565 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004566 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004567 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004568 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004569 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004570 *
4571 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4572 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004573 *
4574 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004575 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004576__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4577 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004578 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004579 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004580 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004581
4582/**
4583 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4584 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004585 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004586 *
4587 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4588 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4589 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4590 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004591 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4592 *
4593 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4594 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004595 *
4596 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4597 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4598 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4599 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4600 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4601 * use common code for all beacons.
4602 */
4603struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004604ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004605
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004606/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004607 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4608 *
4609 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4610 *
4611 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4612 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4613 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4614 */
4615void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4616 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4617
4618/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004619 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004620 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004621 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4622 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004623 *
4624 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004625 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4626 * with this P1K
4627 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004628 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004629static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4630 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4631{
4632 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4633 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4634 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4635
4636 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4637}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004638
4639/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004640 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4641 *
4642 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4643 * and transmitter address.
4644 *
4645 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4646 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4647 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4648 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4649 */
4650void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4651 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4652
4653/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004654 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4655 *
4656 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4657 * in the packet.
4658 *
4659 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4660 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4661 * encrypted with this key
4662 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4663 */
4664void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4665 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004666
4667/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004668 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4669 *
4670 * @pos: start of crypto header
4671 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4672 * @pn: PN to add
4673 *
4674 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4675 * the packet payload)
4676 *
4677 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4678 * point to the crypto header)
4679 */
4680u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4681
4682/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004683 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4684 *
4685 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004686 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004687 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4688 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4689 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4690 *
4691 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4692 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4693 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4694 *
4695 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4696 * can be done concurrently.
4697 */
4698void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4699 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4700
4701/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004702 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4703 *
4704 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004705 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004706 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4707 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4708 * @seq: new sequence data
4709 *
4710 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4711 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4712 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4713 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4714 *
4715 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4716 * can be done concurrently.
4717 */
4718void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4719 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4720
4721/**
4722 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4723 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4724 *
4725 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4726 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4727 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4728 *
4729 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4730 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4731 */
4732void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4733
4734/**
4735 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4736 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4737 * @keyconf: new key data
4738 *
4739 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4740 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4741 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4742 *
4743 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4744 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4745 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4746 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4747 *
4748 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4749 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4750 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4751 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4752 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4753 * of the reconfiguration.
4754 *
4755 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4756 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4757 *
4758 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4759 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4760 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4761 * the key that's being replaced.
4762 */
4763struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4764ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4765 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4766
4767/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004768 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4769 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4770 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4771 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4772 * @gfp: allocation flags
4773 */
4774void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4775 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4776
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004777/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004778 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4779 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4780 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4781 *
4782 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4783 */
4784void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4785
4786/**
4787 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4788 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4789 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4790 *
4791 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4792 */
4793void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4794
4795/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004796 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4797 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4798 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4799 *
4800 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004801 *
4802 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004803 */
4804
4805int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4806
4807/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004808 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4809 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4810 *
4811 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4812 */
4813void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4814
4815/**
4816 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4817 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4818 *
4819 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4820 */
4821void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4822
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004823/**
4824 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4825 *
4826 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4827 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004828 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4829 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004830 *
4831 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004832 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004833 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004834void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4835 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004836
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004837/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004838 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4839 *
4840 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4841 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4842 *
4843 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4844 */
4845void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4846
4847/**
4848 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4849 *
4850 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4851 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4852 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4853 * while associating, for instance.
4854 *
4855 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4856 */
4857void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4858
4859/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004860 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4861 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4862 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4863 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4864 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4865 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4866 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4867 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004868 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004869 */
4870enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4871 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4872 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004873 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004874};
4875
4876/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004877 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4878 *
4879 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4880 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4881 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4882 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4883 *
4884 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4885 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4886 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4887 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4888 */
4889void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4890 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4891 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4892 void *data);
4893
4894/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004895 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004896 *
4897 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4898 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004899 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4900 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4901 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004902 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004903 *
4904 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004905 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004906 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004907 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4908 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004909static inline void
4910ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4911 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4913 void *data)
4914{
4915 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4916 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4917 iterator, data);
4918}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004919
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004920/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004921 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4922 *
4923 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4924 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4925 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4926 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004927 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004928 *
4929 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004930 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004931 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4932 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4933 */
4934void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004935 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004936 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4937 u8 *mac,
4938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4939 void *data);
4940
4941/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004942 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4943 *
4944 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4945 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4946 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4947 *
4948 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4949 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4950 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4951 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4952 */
4953void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4954 u32 iter_flags,
4955 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4956 u8 *mac,
4957 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4958 void *data);
4959
4960/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004961 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4962 *
4963 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4964 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4965 * function for them.
4966 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4967 *
4968 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4969 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4970 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4971 */
4972void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4973 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4974 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4975 void *data);
4976/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004977 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4978 *
4979 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4980 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4981 *
4982 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4983 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4984 */
4985void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4986
4987/**
4988 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4989 *
4990 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4991 * workqueue.
4992 *
4993 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4994 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4995 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4996 */
4997void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4998 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4999 unsigned long delay);
5000
5001/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005002 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005003 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005004 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305005 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005006 *
5007 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005008 *
5009 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5010 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5011 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5012 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305013int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5014 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005015
5016/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005017 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005018 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005019 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5020 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5021 *
5022 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005023 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5024 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005025 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005026void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005027 u16 tid);
5028
5029/**
5030 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005031 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005032 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005033 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005034 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005035 *
5036 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5037 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5038 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5039 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005040int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005041
5042/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005043 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005044 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005045 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5046 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5047 *
5048 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005049 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5050 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005051 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005052void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005053 u16 tid);
5054
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005055/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005056 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5057 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005058 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005059 * @addr: station's address
5060 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005061 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5062 *
5063 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005064 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5065 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005066struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005067 const u8 *addr);
5068
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005069/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005070 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005071 *
5072 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005073 * @addr: remote station's address
5074 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005075 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005076 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5077 *
5078 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005079 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5080 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005081 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5082 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5083 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5084 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5085 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5086 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5087 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005088 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005089 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005090 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005091struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5092 const u8 *addr,
5093 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005094
5095/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005096 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5097 * @hw: the hardware
5098 * @pubsta: the station
5099 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5100 *
5101 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5102 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5103 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5104 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5105 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5106 *
5107 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5108 * manner.
5109 *
5110 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5111 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5112 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5113 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5114 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5115 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5116 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5117 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5118 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5119 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5120 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5121 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5122 * woke up while blocked or not.
5123 */
5124void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5125 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5126
5127/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005128 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5129 * @pubsta: the station
5130 *
5131 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5132 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5133 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5134 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5135 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005136 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5137 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5138 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5139 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5140 *
5141 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5142 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5143 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5144 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005145 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005146void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005147
5148/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005149 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5150 * @pubsta: the station
5151 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5152 *
5153 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5154 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5155 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5156 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5157 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5158 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5159 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5160 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5161 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5162 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5163 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5164 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5165 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5166 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5167 */
5168void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5169
5170/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005171 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5172 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5173 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5174 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5175 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5176 *
5177 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5178 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5179 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5180 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5181 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5182 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005183 *
5184 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5185 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5186 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005187 */
5188void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5189 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5190 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5191 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5192 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5193 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5194 void *data),
5195 void *iter_data);
5196
5197/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005198 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5199 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5200 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5201 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5202 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5203 *
5204 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5205 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5206 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5207 * in removal process will be skipped.
5208 *
5209 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5210 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5211 */
5212void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5213 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5214 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5215 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5216 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5217 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5218 void *data),
5219 void *iter_data);
5220
5221/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005222 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5223 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5224 * @iter: iterator function
5225 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5226 *
5227 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5228 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5229 * places while calling into the driver.
5230 *
5231 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5232 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5233 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005234 *
5235 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5236 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5237 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5238 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005239 */
5240void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5241 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5242 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5243 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5244 void *data),
5245 void *iter_data);
5246
5247/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005248 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5249 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5250 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5251 *
5252 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5253 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5254 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5255 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5256 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005257 * %NULL.
5258 *
5259 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005260 */
5261struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5262 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5263
5264/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005265 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5266 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005267 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005268 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005269 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005270 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005271 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5272 */
5273void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005274
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005275/**
5276 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5277 *
5278 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5279 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005280 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005281 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5282 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005283 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5284 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005285 *
5286 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5287 * without connection recovery attempts.
5288 */
5289void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5290
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005291/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005292 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5293 *
5294 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5295 *
5296 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5297 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5298 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5299 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5300 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5301 *
5302 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5303 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5304 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5305 * disconnect normally later.
5306 *
5307 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5308 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5309 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5310 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5311 */
5312void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5313
5314/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005315 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5316 * rssi threshold triggered
5317 *
5318 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5319 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005320 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005321 * @gfp: context flags
5322 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005323 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005324 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5325 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5326 */
5327void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5328 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005329 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005330 gfp_t gfp);
5331
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005332/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005333 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5334 *
5335 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5336 * @gfp: context flags
5337 */
5338void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5339
5340/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005341 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5342 *
5343 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5344 */
5345void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5346
5347/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005348 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5349 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5350 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5351 *
5352 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5353 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5354 */
5355void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5356
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005357/**
5358 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5359 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005360 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005361 *
5362 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5363 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5364 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5365 */
5366void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5367 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5368
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005369/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005370 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5371 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5372 */
5373void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5374
5375/**
5376 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5377 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5378 */
5379void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5380
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005381/**
5382 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5383 *
5384 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5385 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5386 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5387 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5388 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5389 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5390 *
5391 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5392 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5393 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5394 */
5395void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5396 const u8 *addr);
5397
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005398/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005399 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5400 * @pubsta: station struct
5401 * @tid: the session's TID
5402 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5403 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5404 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5405 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5406 *
5407 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5408 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5409 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5410 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5411 */
5412void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5413 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5414 u16 received_mpdus);
5415
5416/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005417 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5418 *
5419 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5420 * buffer.
5421 *
5422 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5423 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5424 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5425 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5426 */
5427void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5428
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005429/**
5430 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5431 *
5432 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5433 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5434 * reordering.
5435 *
5436 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5437 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5438 *
5439 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5440 * @addr: station mac address
5441 * @tid: the rx tid
5442 */
5443void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5444 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5445
5446/**
5447 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5448 *
5449 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5450 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5451 * reordering.
5452 *
5453 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5454 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5455 *
5456 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5457 * @addr: station mac address
5458 * @tid: the rx tid
5459 */
5460void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5461 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5462
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005463/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005464
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005465/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005466 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005467 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005468 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5469 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5470 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005471 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5472 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005473 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5474 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5475 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5476 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5477 * RTS threshold
5478 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5479 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005480 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005481 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005482 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005483 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005484struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5485 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5486 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5487 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5488 struct sk_buff *skb;
5489 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5490 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005491 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005492 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005493 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005494};
5495
5496struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005497 const char *name;
5498 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005499 void (*free)(void *priv);
5500
5501 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5502 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005503 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005504 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305505 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005506 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005507 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5508 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005509 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5510 void *priv_sta);
5511
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02005512 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5513 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5514 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005515 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5516 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5517 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005518 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5519 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005520
5521 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5522 struct dentry *dir);
5523 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005524
5525 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005526};
5527
5528static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005529 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005530 int index)
5531{
5532 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5533}
5534
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005535/**
5536 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5537 *
5538 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5539 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5540 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5541 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5542 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5543 * not null.
5544 *
5545 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5546 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5547 *
5548 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5549 * that this may be null.
5550 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5551 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5552 */
5553bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5554 void *priv_sta,
5555 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5556
5557
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005558static inline s8
5559rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5560 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5561{
5562 int i;
5563
5564 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5565 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5566 return i;
5567
5568 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005569 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005570
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005571 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005572 return 0;
5573}
5574
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005575static inline
5576bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5577 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5578{
5579 unsigned int i;
5580
5581 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5582 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5583 return true;
5584 return false;
5585}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005586
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005587/**
5588 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5589 *
5590 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5591 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5592 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5593 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5594 *
5595 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5596 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5597 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5598 */
5599int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5600 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5601 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5602
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005603int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5604void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005605
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005606static inline bool
5607conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5608{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005609 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005610}
5611
5612static inline bool
5613conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5614{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005615 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5616 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005617}
5618
5619static inline bool
5620conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5621{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005622 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5623 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005624}
5625
5626static inline bool
5627conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5628{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005629 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005630}
5631
5632static inline bool
5633conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5634{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005635 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5636 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5637 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005638}
5639
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005640static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5641ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5642{
5643 if (p2p) {
5644 switch (type) {
5645 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5646 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5647 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5648 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5649 default:
5650 break;
5651 }
5652 }
5653 return type;
5654}
5655
5656static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5657ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5658{
5659 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5660}
5661
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005662/**
5663 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5664 *
5665 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5666 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5667 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5668 *
5669 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5670 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5671 * matching GroupId management frame.
5672 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5673 */
5674void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5675 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5676
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005677void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5678 int rssi_min_thold,
5679 int rssi_max_thold);
5680
5681void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005682
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005683/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005684 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005685 *
5686 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5687 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005688 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5689 *
5690 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5691 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005692 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005693int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5694
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005695/**
5696 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5697 * @vif: virtual interface
5698 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5699 * @gfp: allocation flags
5700 *
5701 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5702 */
5703void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5704 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5705 gfp_t gfp);
5706
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005707/**
5708 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5709 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5710 * @vif: virtual interface
5711 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5712 * @band: the band to transmit on
5713 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5714 *
5715 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5716 */
5717bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5718 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5719 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5720
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005721/**
5722 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5723 *
5724 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5725 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5726 *
5727 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5728 *
5729 * private:
5730 *
5731 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5732 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5733 */
5734struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5735 u32 next_tsf;
5736 bool has_next_tsf;
5737
5738 u8 absent;
5739
5740 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5741 struct {
5742 u32 start;
5743 u32 duration;
5744 u32 interval;
5745 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5746};
5747
5748/**
5749 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5750 *
5751 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5752 * @data: NoA tracking data
5753 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5754 *
5755 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5756 */
5757int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5758 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5759
5760/**
5761 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5762 *
5763 * @data: NoA tracking data
5764 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5765 */
5766void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5767
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005768/**
5769 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5770 * @vif: virtual interface
5771 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5772 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5773 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5774 * @gfp: allocation flags
5775 *
5776 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5777 */
5778void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5779 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5780 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005781
5782/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005783 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5784 *
5785 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5786 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5787 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5788 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5789 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5790 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5791 *
5792 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5793 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5794 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5795 *
5796 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5797 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5798 *
5799 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5800 */
5801int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5802
5803/**
5804 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5805 *
5806 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5807 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5808 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5809 *
5810 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5811 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5812 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5813 *
5814 * @sta: the station
5815 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5816 */
5817void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5818
5819/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005820 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5821 *
5822 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5823 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5824 *
5825 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5826 */
5827struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5828 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005829
5830/**
5831 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5832 *
5833 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5834 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5835 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5836 *
5837 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5838 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5839 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5840 */
5841void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5842 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5843 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005844
5845/**
5846 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5847 *
5848 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5849 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5850 *
5851 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5852 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5853 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5854 * @gfp: allocation flags
5855 */
5856void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5857 u8 inst_id,
5858 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5859 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005860
5861/**
5862 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5863 *
5864 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5865 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5866 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5867 *
5868 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5869 * @match: match event information
5870 * @gfp: allocation flags
5871 */
5872void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5873 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5874 gfp_t gfp);
5875
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005876#endif /* MAC80211_H */